Oldsmobile 1999, 1999 Cutlass Owner's manual

Oldsmobile 1999, 1999 Cutlass Owner's manual
yellowblue
The 1999 Oldsmobile Cutlass Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SRS” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Oldsmobile for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-9.
9-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
yellowblue
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
OLDSMOBILE, the OLDSMOBILE Rocket Emblem
are registered trademarks and the name CUTLASS is a
trademark of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in
the product after that time without further notice.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 22600397 B First Edition
ii
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
ECopyright General Motors Corporation 1998
All Rights Reserved
yellowblue
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
yellowblue
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
yellowblue
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
PARKING
LAMPS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
AIR BAG
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
FUSE
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
LIGHTER
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
SPEAKER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
FUEL
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
v
yellowblue
✍
vi
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-6
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-27
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Rear Seat Passengers
1-30
1-32
1-34
1-37
1-49
1-52
1-52
1-52
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-
1-1
yellowblue
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to
adjust them -- and also about reclining seatbacks and
head restraints.
Manual Seats
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Lift the lever under the front seat to unlock it. Slide the
seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try
to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is
locked into place.
yellowblue
6-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)
Move the seat higher by lifting and holding the bottom
of the button. Lower the seat by pushing and holding the
top of the button.
To move the seat forward, push the rear of the button
forward. To move the seat backward, push the front of
the button rearward.
Raise the front of the seat by lifting and holding the
bottom front end of the button. Lower the front of
the seat by pushing and holding the top front end of
the button.
Raise the rear of the seat by lifting and holding the
bottom rear of the button. Lower the rear of the seat by
pushing and holding the top rear of the button.
The power seat button is located on the lower left side of
the driver’s seat. This button allows you to move the
seat up, down, forward and backward. It also moves the
front of the seat up or down and the rear of the seat up
or down.
1-3
yellowblue
Reclining Front Seatbacks
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side of
the seat and move the seatback to where you want it.
Release the lever and ensure the handle returns to the
original position and the seatback is securely locked.
Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an
upright position.
1-4
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
yellowblue
Head Restraints
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Rear Seats
Folding Rear Seat
1-5
yellowblue
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), or air bag system.
CAUTION:
To open the folding rear seat, open the trunk and pull
one or both of the tethers located on the left side of the
trunk. The left-hand tether will open the larger side of
the seatback. The right-hand tether will open the smaller
side of the seatback. Once a tether is pulled, the seatback
can be pushed open through the trunk, or pulled open
from inside the vehicle.
To close the split folding rear seat, push the seatback up
until you hear a click. Then pull on the seatback to make
sure it is secure.
1-6
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-7
yellowblue
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-8
yellowblue
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-9
yellowblue
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
yellowblue
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-11
yellowblue
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller
children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
1-12
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
yellowblue
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt
the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle
the belt.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-13
yellowblue
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-14
To move it down, pushing up on the shoulder belt guide.
and move the height adjuster to the desired position.
You can move the adjuster up just by squeezing the
release button. After you move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it down without to make sure it
has locked into position.
yellowblue
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-15
yellowblue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
yellowblue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-17
yellowblue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-18
yellowblue
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-19
yellowblue
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position”
earlier in this section.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) or air bag system.
Your vehicle has “Next Generation” frontal air
bags -- one air bag for the driver and another air bag
for the right front passenger.
Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
quickly if they are to do their job and comply with
federal regulations.
1-20
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags -- even Next Generation air
bags -- are designed to work with safety belts,
but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to
work only in moderate to severe crashes where
the front of your vehicle hits something. They
aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear,
side or low-speed frontal crashes.
CAUTION: (Continued)
yellowblue
CAUTION: (Continued)
And, for unrestrained occupants, Next Generation
air bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have provided
in the past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly -- whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, as you would be if you were leaning
forward, it could seriously injure you. This is true
even with Next Generation frontal air bags.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with Next Generation air bags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. This is true even though your vehicle has
Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
adults, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
the part of this manual called “Children” and see
the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right
front passenger’s safety belt.
1-21
yellowblue
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air
bag symbol.
How the Air Bag System Works
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-22
yellowblue
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-23
yellowblue
When should an air bag inflate?
What makes an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
1-24
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
yellowblue
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the
bag that come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and
dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system. The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when the
system commands air bag inflation and driver’s
safety belt usage at deployment.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
1-25
yellowblue
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water -- such as
water up to the carpeting or higher -- or if water enters
your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle, the damage could make the air bags
inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to replace
the air bags as well as the sensors and related parts. If your
vehicle is ever in a flood, or if it’s exposed to water that
soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless repair costs by
turning off the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the
battery cables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under any
circumstances. See your dealer for service.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is qualified
to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-26
yellowblue
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-27
yellowblue
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
1-28
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
yellowblue
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
1-29
yellowblue
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
1-30
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
yellowblue
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
1-31
yellowblue
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the
guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic
cord exposed.
Center Passenger Position
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
1-32
yellowblue
Lap Belt
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-33
yellowblue
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-34
Smaller Children and Babies
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. This is true even though your vehicle
has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for adults, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether it is
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
Infants need complete support, including support for the
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear-facing
restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate infant restraint. This is so important that many
hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its
parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the
baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.
1-35
yellowblue
CAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-36
yellowblue
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-37
yellowblue
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two
parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and
the seat part is removable.
1-38
yellowblue
A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to
18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in
height, or up to around four years of age. One type,
a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either
as a rear-facing infant seat or a forward-facing
child seat.
1-39
yellowblue
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs. (18 to
27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight
years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder belts.
Booster seats can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-40
yellowblue
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. This
is because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating air
bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-41
yellowblue
Top Strap
This work will be done for you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using the instructions
provided in the kit.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
Canadian law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap
be anchored.
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, your
dealer can obtain a kit with anchor hardware and
installation instructions specifically designed for this
vehicle. The dealer can then install the anchor for you.
1-42
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
yellowblue
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-43
yellowblue
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-44
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
yellowblue
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-45
yellowblue
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. This
is because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating air
bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
1-46
yellowblue
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-47
yellowblue
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint. You may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-48
yellowblue
Larger Children
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-49
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
1-50
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lap belt.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-51
yellowblue
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-52
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the special
part of the safety belt that goes through the seat to the
adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
yellowblue
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-10
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-16
2-17
2-19
2-23
2-24
2-26
2-27
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Lock Control (Option)
Trunk
Theft
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-31
2-38
2-40
2-42
2-44
2-47
2-48
2-50
2-52
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
Horn
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sunroof (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel-Your
Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-
2-1
yellowblue
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
yellowblue
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
If you need a new key, go to your dealer for the correct
key code.
In an emergency, call the Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance Program at 1-800-442-OLDS (6537).
NOTICE:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the key has a
bar-coded key tag. This tag may be removed by your
dealer before it is delivered.
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft, therefore you can have a
lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you
have extra keys.
Each tag has a key code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able
to have one made easily using this tag.
2-3
yellowblue
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers -- especially children -- can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or remote lock control
transmitter, if your vehicle is equipped with it.
2-4
From the inside, to lock the door, move the locking
lever forward.
To unlock the door, move the locking lever rearward.
yellowblue
Power Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
With the power door locks,
you can unlock or lock all
of the doors of your vehicle
from the driver or front
passenger door lock switch.
Pull up on the switch to unlock all the doors. Push down
on the switch to lock the doors.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors of your vehicle is not closed
properly, the ignition is on and you shift from PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N), you will hear a chime. Also, a door
ajar light on the instrument panel will come on and stay
on until the doors are closed and completely latched.
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear door security
locks that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors of your
vehicle from the inside.
The switch is located on the inside of the rear door. To
use one of these locks:
1. Move the switch up.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing on the other rear door.
2-5
yellowblue
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open a rear door when the security lock is on:
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults and
older children know how these security locks work, and
how to cancel the locks.
To cancel the rear door lock:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open it from
the outside.
Remote Lock Control (Option)
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote lock control
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
In addition, the system
illuminates the interior
lights for a set period of
time. The remote lock
control system consists of a
receiver, which is located in
the vehicle, and two
hand-held transmitters.
2. Move the switch down.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear doors will now work normally.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving your vehicle, open your door and lock
the doors from the inside, then get out and close
the door.
2-6
Your remote lock control operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
yellowblue
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-7
yellowblue
Operation
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
The following functions are available with the remote
lock control system:
UNLOCK:The driver’s door will unlock automatically
when the UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed.
If the UNLOCK button is pressed again within five
seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
Each remote lock control transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
: The trunk will unlock anytime the vehicle
symbol on the transmitter is pressed, the trunk lockout is
not engaged and the gear selector is in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N).
You can match your transmitter to as many 1999
General Motors vehicles as you own, as long as they
have the same remote lock control system. Contact your
dealer for assistance with this.
LOCK All doors will automatically lock when the
LOCK button on the transmitter is pressed. Press the
button a second time and you will hear a “chirp” to
indicate that the doors have been locked.
2-8
yellowblue
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote lock
control transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote lock
control transmitter:
1. Use a small coin or flathead screwdriver to separate
the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new one.
Make sure the positive (+) side of the battery faces
down. Use one three-volt, CR2032, or equivalent,
type battery.
3. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
cover is on tightly, so water won’t get in.
2-9
yellowblue
4. Check the operation of the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try
resynchronizing the transmitter with the receiver.
Trunk
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key and turn
the trunk lock cylinder or use the remote lock lock control.
Resynchronization
Your remote lock control system is equipped with a
security system that prevents anyone from recording and
playing back your signal. The transmitter does not send
the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will
not respond to a signal that has been sent to it more
than once.
To resynchronize your transmitter and receiver, follow
these directions:
1. Stand close to your vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on
the transmitter at the same time.
3. Hold the buttons for five seconds. In this time, the
doors should lock and unlock once. This confirms
the resynchronization. If the doors do not lock and
unlock, see your dealer for service.
2-10
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
trunk lid:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting on
VENT. That will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
yellowblue
Remote Trunk Release
Press the remote release button, located on the lower left
side of the instrument panel, to release the trunk lid.
Make sure the lockout feature is not activated. Also, the
remote trunk release will only work when the gearshift
lever is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Remote Trunk Release Lockout
Your remote trunk release is equipped with a lockout
feature to help prevent unauthorized entry into the trunk
when leaving the vehicle unattended. The switch is
located on the inside of the trunk lid, mounted to the
trunk lid latch.
To turn the lockout on, slide the switch all the way to the
left. To turn the lockout off, slide the switch all the way
to the right.
When the lockout is on, the remote trunk release switch
on the instrument panel will not release the trunk lid.
However, the trunk lid can still be opened with the key,
but not with the remote lock control transmitter.
2-11
yellowblue
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your ignition and transaxle will be locked. And
remember to lock the doors.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your key?
D If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the
storage area.
D Close all windows.
D Move the trunk release lockout switch to the
ON position.
D Lock the glove box.
D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
D If your vehicle has a remote lock control system,
take the transmitter with you.
2-12
yellowblue
PasslockR
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the THEFT SYSTEM light
will go off approximately five seconds after the key is
turned to the ON ignition position.
If the THEFT SYSTEM light flashes, wait until the light
stops flashing before starting the engine.
In an emergency, call the Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance Center at 1-800-442-OLDS (6537).
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
2-13
yellowblue
Ignition Positions
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be injured or even killed. They could
operate power windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in
the vehicle with children.
With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn
the switch to four positions.
OFF (A): Before you put the key into the ignition
switch, the switch is off. It is the only position from
which you can remove the key. This position locks your
ignition and transaxle. A warning chime will sound if
you open the driver’s door when the ignition is off and
the key is in the ignition.
2-14
yellowblue
ACC (Accessory) (B): This position unlocks the
transaxle. It also lets you use things like the radio and
windshield wipers when the engine is not running. To
use ACC, push in the key and turn it clockwise. Use this
position if your vehicle must be pushed or towed, but
never try to push-start your vehicle.
ON (C): This position unlocks the ignition and
transaxle. This position is also where the key returns
after you start your engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON to
operate your electrical power accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
START (D): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON for normal driving.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
2-15
yellowblue
Starting Your Engine
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2-16
yellowblue
2. If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops), it
could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to 15 seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
2-17
yellowblue
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
engine coolant heater cord is located near the air
cleaner/filter.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
2-18
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
yellowblue
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on the
console between the seats.
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-19
yellowblue
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in the RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) -- as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into the
gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before
moving the shift lever.) See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)”
later in this section.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N)
when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
NOTICE:
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “Stuck
In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-20
Do not shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing. Your transaxle can be
damaged by doing this and will not be covered by
your warranty. Shift your transaxle according to
the instructions in this manual.
yellowblue
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
D Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
D Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down. You’ll shift down to
the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here
are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
D When driving on hilly, winding roads.
D When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
D When going down a steep hill.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or
if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster,
something may be wrong with a transaxle system
sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you
can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (56 km/h) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
2-21
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (41 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3) as much as possible. Don’t shift into
SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than
65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damage
your engine.
SECOND (2) will select either first or second gear
depending on vehicle speed. If your vehicle is slowing,
the transaxle will downshift to first gear at 20 to
25 miles per hour (32 to 40 km/h) for engine braking.
You may notice some variation in shift speed in
SECOND (2) when accelerating or braking.
2-22
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t
shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You can damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P)
to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
yellowblue
Second-Gear Start
Your vehicle is equipped with a second-gear start
feature. Place the shift lever in SECOND (2) gear to
provide more traction when you are starting on ice or
other slippery surfaces. The transaxle will be in
SECOND (2) gear when the vehicle begins to move.
After starting in SECOND (2) gear, place the shift lever
in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
This feature is only for improved traction only when the
road surface is slippery and is not intended for
continuous use or when the vehicle is stuck in sand,
mud, ice, snow or gravel.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot.
Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot. If the ignition is on,
the brake system warning
light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down on the
parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the parking
brake is not released when you begin to drive, a chime
will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
2-23
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2-24
yellowblue
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
D Hold in the button on the lever.
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of
your vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your
vehicle is in PARK (P).
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully
locked into PARK (P).
2-25
yellowblue
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-26
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
CAUTION:
Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fully
apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to apply your regular brake before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in
RUN . See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
yellowblue
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) -- as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift into the gear you wish. (Press the shift
lever button before moving the shift lever.)
Parking Over Things That Burn
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to the ACC ignition position.
2. Apply and hold the regular brake until the end of
Step 5.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the key to START, to start the vehicle.
5. Shift to the drive gear you want.
6. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-27
yellowblue
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-28
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
yellowblue
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Windows
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
The power window switches are located on the armrest
of the driver’s door. In addition, each passenger door has
a switch for its own window.
2-29
yellowblue
Auto-Down Switch
Tilt Wheel
The driver’s window switch has an auto-down feature.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Push the switch back
partway, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. If the switch is pushed all the way back, the
window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, move the
switch forward. To raise the window, move and hold the
switch forward.
Lock-Out-Switch
The driver’s power window controls also include a lock
out switch. Press LOCK OUT to stop front and rear
passengers from using their window switches. The
driver can still control all the windows with the lock on.
Press the LOCK OUT button again for normal
window operation.
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbol on
your steering wheel.
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you.
Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then
release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
2-30
yellowblue
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
D Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
D Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
D Park Lamps and Headlamps
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
A warning chime signal will come on if you have left
your turn signal on for more than 3/4 mile (1 km).
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow
flashes rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and
other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
2-31
yellowblue
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrow doesn’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Windshield Wipers
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps
from low beam to high
beam, push forward on the
turn signal/multifunction
lever.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you. When the high
beams are on, a light on the instrument panel will also
be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
2-32
You control the windshield wipers by moving the stalk
with the wiper symbol on it up or down.
For a single wiper cycle, move the stalk down to MIST,
then release it. For more cycles, hold the stalk
down longer.
yellowblue
For steady wiping at low speed, move the stalk up to the
LO. For high-speed wiping, move the stalk up further, to
HI. To stop the wipers, move the stalk to OFF.
Windshield Washer
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short
delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light
rain or snow.
Move the stalk to INT, then turn the inner band, labeled
INT ADJ, and choose the delay you want. Turn the inner
band up for shorter delay times between wiper cycles.
Turn the band down for a longer delay time between
wiper cycles.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your
blades do become damaged, get new blades or
blade inserts.
To wash your windshield, push in the button at the end
of the stalk until the washers begin.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
2-33
yellowblue
Cruise Control
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times or
will either stop or will resume the speed you were
using before.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brake, the cruise control shuts off.
2-34
yellowblue
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you
D
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use it.
The cruise control buttons are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the cruise control OFF/ON button.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET DECEL button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-35
yellowblue
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it. Once
you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can
press the cruise control ACCEL RESUME button for
about half a second.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you press the ACCEL RESUME button longer than
half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold down the ACCEL
RESUME button.
2-36
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the SET DECEL button, then release the button
and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the
higher speed.
D Press the ACCEL RESUME button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and then
release the button. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, press the ACCEL RESUME button
for less than half a second and then release it. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you turn on
the cruise control by pushing the SET DECEL button.
yellowblue
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
D Push the SET DECEL button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
D To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET
DECEL button for less than half a second. Each time
you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Ending Out of Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Step lightly on the brake pedal;
D Press the cruise control OFF/ON button.
Erasing the Cruise Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-37
yellowblue
Exterior Lamps
Turn the turn signal lever end cap up two positions to
turn on:
D
D
D
D
D
D
Headlamps
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Turn the switch to OFF to turn all of the lamps off.
Lamps On Reminder
Turn the turn signal lever end cap up one position to
turn on:
D
D
D
D
D
Parking Lamps
Side Marker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2-38
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the ignition
while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a
warning chime.
yellowblue
Daytime Running Lamps
Automatic Light Control (ALC)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
When it is dark enough outside, your Automatic Light
Control (ALC) will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, park lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when:
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top
of the instrument panel under the defroster grill, so be
sure it is not covered which will cause the ALC system
to be on whenever the ignition is on.
D the ignition is on,
D the headlamp switch is to OFF or you have turned on
your parking lamps,
D the light sensor detects daytime light,
D the parking brake is released and
D the shift lever is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker,
park lamps and instrument panel lights will not
be illuminated.
The DRL system will remain off any time your vehicle
is in PARK (P) or the parking brake is engaged.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
The ALC system may also be on when driving through a
parking garage, heavy overcast weather, a tunnel. This
is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the ALC
systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
ALC systems will only be affected when the light sensor
sees a change in lighting lasting longer than this delay.
To idle your vehicle with the ALC system off, set the
park brake while the ignition is off. Then start the
vehicle. The ALC system will stay off until you release
the park brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
2-39
yellowblue
Fog Lamps
Interior Lamps
The button for your fog
lamps is on the instrument
panel, to the left of the
steering wheel, beside
the instrument panel
intensity control.
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
You can brighten or dim the
instrument panel cluster
lights by rotating the switch,
located to the left of the
steering wheel.
When using fog lamps, the ignition must be on, as well
as the parking lamps or the low-beam headlamps.
Push the top of the button to turn the fog lamps on. An
indicator light on the button will glow when the fog
lamps are on. Push the top of the button again to turn the
fog lamps off.
The fog lamps will turn off whenever the high-beam
headlamps are turned on. When the high-beams are
turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
2-40
Illuminated Entry/Exit System
When you open any door, the lamps inside your vehicle
will go on. These lamps will fade out after about 40
seconds, or when the ignition is turned on after all doors
have been closed. If the ignition was recently turned off,
the lamps will fade out after four seconds. These lamps
will also go on when you press the vehicle symbol or
UNLOCK button on the remote lock control transmitter.
yellowblue
If the ignition has been off for less than two minutes, the
lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about 15
seconds after your key is removed from the ignition to
provide an illuminated exit.
Mirror Reading Lamps
Press the switch on the lower front portion of the mirror
to turn on the lamp. Press the other side of the switch to
turn the lamp off.
Three-Position Dome Lamp
The switch on this lamp has three positions. The ON
position will turn on the light. The DOOR position will
turn on the light whenever a door is opened. The OFF
position will shut off the lamp completely, even when a
door is opened.
Battery Saver
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, footwell or
glove box) is left on when the ignition is turned off, the
battery saver system will automatically shut the lamp off
after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.
To reactivate the interior lamps, either:
D the ignition must be turned on,
D the activated lamp switch must be turned off and
then on or
D a front door must be opened.
The battery saver feature will also be activated when
any door of your vehicle is left open.
Trunk Lamp
The trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.
2-41
yellowblue
Mirrors
Manual Remote Control Mirror
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you
can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting
in a comfortable driving position.
Adjust the driver’s side
outside mirror with the
control lever on the
driver’s door.
To adjust your passenger’s side mirror, sit in the driver’s
seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you.
This mirror can be adjusted two ways. First, to adjust
the angle of the mirror, move the mirror to a position
that allows you see out the back window. To adjust the
height of the mirror, adjust the arm that connects the
mirror to the windshield.
To reduce glare from lights behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
2-42
yellowblue
Power Remote Control Mirror
(If Equipped)
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
This switch is located on the armrest of the driver’s
door. Move this switch to the L (left) or R (right)
depending on which mirror you need to adjust (center is
the off position.) Then adjust the direction of the mirror
using the pad marked with arrows just below the
selector switch.
2-43
yellowblue
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Cupholder
Glove Box
Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box. To open,
pull the glove box handle toward you.
Center Console Storage Area
The center console has two separate storage areas. The
upper compartment, which is also the armrest, can be
used to store maps, gloves, etc. To open, pull up on the
driver’s side of the lid.
The lower area can be used to store cassette tapes or
compact discs. To open the lower compartment, pull up
on the armrest.
The instrument panel cupholder is located to the left of
the steering wheel. To use it, pull it out until the
rubber insert is revealed. The insert is removable for
easy cleaning.
2-44
yellowblue
Center Console Cupholder
Sun Visors
The console provides space for holding a cup or soft
drink container. The cupholder is located at the rear of
the shift lever.
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them to the side.
Rear Seat Cupholder
Pull down the door on the rear of the center console to
use the rear seat cupholder.
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it
just inside the back wall of the trunk.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Lift the cover to expose the visor vanity mirror.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
This mirror is located on the passenger’s side visor.
When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-45
yellowblue
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with two accessory power
outlets. There is one located at the front of the center
console and one located on the passenger’s side of the
center console.
You can use it to plug in additional electric accessories.
Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions that
are included with any electrical accessory you install.
The accessory power outlets are protected by a fuse and
have a maximum current level.
2-46
Garment Hook
Pull down on the outer ring
to use the garment hook.
yellowblue
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Open the sunshade by hand when using the
vent position.
To use the vent position of the sunroof, push the
switch back and release it. This is the express-vent
mode of the sunroof.
To fully open the sunroof, push the switch back again
and release. This is the express-open mode of the
sunroof and sunshade.
In both the vent and full open positions, the air flow can
be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and holding
the switch forward until the sunroof moves to a
desired position.
To close the sunroof, push the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if the
switch is released during operation. Remember to close
the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
NOTICE:
Do not attempt to force the sunshade forward of
the sliding glass panel. Damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly.
2-47
yellowblue
The Instrument Panel-Your Information System
2-48
yellowblue
The main components of your instrument panel are:
A. Fog Lamp Switch
K. Climate Control System
B. Instrument Panel Intensity Control
L. Accessory Power Outlet
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
M. Cigarette Lighter
D. Cruise Control Switches (If Equipped)
N. Gear Shift Lever
E. Horn
O. Audio System
F. Instrument Panel Cluster
P. Parking Brake
G. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Q. Tilt Wheel
H. Ignition Switch
R. Hood Release Lever
I. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
S. Trunk Release Button
J. Fuse Panels
T. Instrument Panel Cupholder
2-49
yellowblue
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your vehicle is equipped with this cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the
following pages. Be sure to read them.
2-50
yellowblue
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell
you how far you have
driven since you last reset it.
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 99,999.9 if someone tries to
turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if
it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
The reset button is located next to the trip odometer. To
reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the reset
button for one to two seconds. Also by pressing this
button, you can toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer.
2-51
yellowblue
Tachometer
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
NOTICE:
Do not run your engine at speeds in the red area,
or engine damage may occur.
2-52
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
yellowblue
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then it
will flash for about
55 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the air bag sensor, the air bag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-53
yellowblue
Charging System Indicator Light
The charging system
indicator light will come on
when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is
not running, as a check to
show you it is working.
When the engine is running, it should go out.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving and you
hear a chime, you may have a problem with the
electrical charging system. It could indicate that you
have a loose generator drive belt or another electrical
problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
2-54
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it
doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light and chime come on while you are driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
yellowblue
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you turn your
ignition on or start your
engine and it will stay on
for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the
light comes on and the chime sounds when you’re
driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If
the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re
driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.
See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in
this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-55
yellowblue
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the
red area, the light comes on
and you hear a chime, your
engine is too hot! It means
that your engine coolant
has overheated.
Low Coolant Warning Light
This light comes on
briefly when you turn
your ignition on.
If this light comes on and stays on and you hear a chime,
the vehicle should promptly be pulled off the road and
the coolant level checked.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-56
See “Engine Coolant” in the Index. If there are visible
signs of steam, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index
before opening the hood. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as you can.
yellowblue
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light)
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,
exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the
replacement of the original tires with other than
those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the CHECK ENGINE light to
come on. Modifications to these systems could
lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
2-57
yellowblue
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
2-58
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
yellowblue
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
If you have a low engine oil
pressure problem, this light
will stay on after you start
your engine, or come on
and you will hear a chime
when you are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
When the ignition is on but the engine is not running,
the light will come on as a test to show you it is
working, but the light will go out when you turn the
engine is running. If it doesn’t come on with the ignition
on, you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have
it fixed right away.
2-59
yellowblue
Check Oil Light
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
This light will come on
briefly when you start
your vehicle.
If the light comes on and you hear a chime or stays on
after starting your vehicle, your engine oil level should
be checked.
Prior to checking the oil level, be sure your vehicle has
been shut off for several minutes and is on a level
surface. Check the oil level on your dipstick and bring it
to the proper level. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
NOTE: A false CHECK OIL light may be generated
when parking on steep grades.
The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level
during the brief period between key on and engine
crank. It does not monitor engine oil level when the
engine is running. Additionally, an oil level check is
only performed if the engine has been turned off for a
considerable period of time allowing the oil normally in
circulation to drain back into the oil pan.
2-60
yellowblue
PasslockR Warning Light
Cruise Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the ignition on. The
light will stay on until
the engine starts.
If the light flashes for several seconds, the Passlock
system has entered a tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to
start, see “Passlock” in the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your dealer.
The CRUISE light comes
on whenever you set your
cruise control.
Low Washer Light
The LOW WASH light will
come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition.
It will also come on, chime and stay on if the fluid
reservoir is less than one-third full.
2-61
yellowblue
Service Vehicle Soon Light
Fuel Gage
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
on the ignition.
It will stay on if it detects a problem on the vehicle, such
as a DRL or an ALC malfunction. If this happens, see
your dealer service department as soon as possible.
Door Ajar Light
When the ignition is on, this
light will stay on until all
doors are closed and
completely latched.
You will hear a brief chime if a door is unlatched after
the engine is started and the vehicle is not in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N).
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left, when the ignition
is on. When the indicator
nears empty, the light will
come on and you will hear a
chime. You still have a little
fuel left, but you should get
more soon.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
D At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
D The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
2-62
yellowblue
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-9
Comfort Controls
Climate Control System with
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting Windows
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3-13
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-24
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone
Control (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-
3-1
yellowblue
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. The climate control system with air
conditioning uses ozone-friendly R-134a refrigerant.
With this system, you can control the ventilation and
heating in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the
flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Climate Control System with
Air Conditioning
Fan Knob
The left knob selects the force of air you want.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed and
counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. To turn the fan
off (which will also turn the climate control system off),
turn the knob all the way counterclockwise. In any other
setting, the fan will run continuously. The fan must be
on to run the air conditioning compressor.
Temperature Knob
The center knob regulates the temperature of the air
coming through the system.
Mode Knob
The right control knob changes the functions of
the system.
VENT: In this position most of the air comes
through the instrument panel outlets. A small amount of
air comes through the floor outlets. Set the center
control knob to the temperature desired.
BI-LEVEL: In this position the air comes
through the instrument panel outlets and through the
floor outlets. Set the center control knob to the
temperature desired.
3-2
yellowblue
FLOOR: In this position most of the air comes
through the floor outlet. The rest of the air comes
through the windshield and side window outlets. Set the
center control knob to the temperature desired.
DEFOG: This position divides the air between
the floor outlets and the windshield defroster outlets.
The air conditioning compressor will run automatically
in this position when it is needed to help dry the air in
the vehicle.
DEFROST: This position directs most of the air
through the windshield defroster outlet. Some of the air
goes to the floor outlets. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this position when
it is needed to help dry the air in the vehicle.
Air Conditioning Compressor Button
Press A/C to operate the air conditioner compressor.
The indicator light will glow when the button is pressed
to indicate that the air conditioning system has been
turned on. The fan knob must be set to a speed.
Recirculation Button
Press this button to limit the amount of fresh air
entering your vehicle. This is helpful when you are
trying to limit odors entering your vehicle. The indicator
light on the button will glow when it is pressed.
RECIRCULATION is available in all modes, except
DEFOG and DEFROST.
Pressing RECIRCULATION will cancel
OUTSIDE AIR.
It is not recommended to use this button in the FLOOR
mode with heat. It is useful to quickly cool the vehicle
on hot days.
Outside Air
Press this button to allow the circulation of outside air in
the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will glow
when pressed. OUTSIDE AIR is available in all modes
including OFF and is automatically activated in DEFOG
and DEFROST.
Pressing OUTSIDE AIR will cancel RECIRCULATION.
3-3
yellowblue
Air Conditioning
Heating
The air conditioner and heater work best if you keep
your windows closed while using them. Your vehicle
also has the flow-through ventilation system described
later in this section.
On cold days, use FLOOR and the outside air button
with the temperature knob all the way in the red area.
The system will bring in outside air, heat it and send it to
the floor outlets.
On very hot days, open the windows long enough to
let hot inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes
for your vehicle to cool down, which should help
fuel economy.
Your vehicle has heat outlets that are directed toward
the rear seat. Keep the area under the front seats clear
of obstructions so the heated air can reach the rear
seat passengers.
On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper
body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.
You can use BI-LEVEL with the temperature knob in
the middle and the A/C button pushed in. The system
will bring in outside air and direct slightly warmer air to
your lower body.
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use
it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s
cold outside (0_F (-18_C) or lower). An engine coolant
heater warms the coolant your engine and heating
system use to provide heat. See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
For quick cool-down on very hot days, use VENT with
the temperature knob all the way in the blue area and the
A/C and RECIRCULATION buttons pressed. If this
setting is used for long periods of time, the air in your
vehicle may become too dry.
Defogging and Defrosting Windows
For normal cooling on hot days, use VENT with the
temperature knob in the blue area and the A/C button
pushed in. The system will bring in outside air and
cool it.
To defrost the front window quickly, turn the temperature
control knob all the way in the red area. Use DEFROST
and adjust the fan to the highest speed. To warm
passengers while keeping the front window clean,
use DEFOG.
3-4
Your system has two settings for clearing the front and
side windows. For each setting, adjust the temperature
control as desired.
yellowblue
If you select RECIRCULATION while in the VENT,
BI-LEVEL or FLOOR modes, humid air can recirculate
inside the vehicle and allow moisture to form on the
windows. If this happens, either press the A/C button to
on or select DEFROST or the DEFOG modes.
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
outlets. The side window defogger outlets are located on
the outside of the side instrument panel outlets. To defrost
the side windows turn the temperature control knob all
the way in the red area. Use FLOOR and adjust the fan to
the highest speed. To control fogging of the windows turn
the temperature control knob all the way to the red area.
Use DEFOG and adjust the fan to the highest speed.
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
The rear window defogger
uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the
rear window.
To defog the side windows while using air conditioning
use BI-LEVEL and adjust the fan to the highest speed
and press the A/C button. For added airflow to the side
windows aim the side vents toward the windows and
close the center outlets.
Press the defogger switch. The indicator light will glow.
The rear window defogger will turn itself off after about
10 minutes after the first time the button is pressed,
and after 5 minutes each additional time the button is
pressed. You can turn the defogger off by pressing the
button again or turning off the ignition.
RECIRCULATION will not work in DEFROST and
DEFOG. This is done to prevent recirculation of humid
inside air and allow the system to work properly.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license across the
defogger grid on the rear window.
3-5
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on
the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the
flow-through ventilation system.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning
fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction, such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the
mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest
speed for a few moments before driving off. This
helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture
and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of
your windows.
3-6
yellowblue
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
AM-FM Stereo
objects. This helps air circulate throughout
your vehicle.
D To prevent circulation of outside air, press the
RECIRCULATION button. This will close all
outside outlets.
Audio Systems
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the
advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears.
The letter A or P may appear on the display for AM
or PM. Then, press and hold MN until the correct
minute appears. The clock may be set with the ignition
on or off.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
3-7
yellowblue
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the RECALL button until you see the display you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock
will show for a few seconds.
PUSHBUTTONS: The five numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
15 stations (five AM, five FM1 and five FM2). Just:
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
4. Press and hold one of the five numbered buttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button and release it to listen to
stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,
stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press the button again to stop scanning. The sound will
mute while scanning, and SCAN will appear on the
display. If you press SCAN for more than two seconds,
the radio will change to P SCAN mode. P SCAN will
appear on the display.
3-8
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
P SCAN: Press SCAN for more than two seconds, and
P SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will go to
the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning.
yellowblue
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it to increase or decrease
treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
FADE: Press the knob lightly so it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it to move the sound to
the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
3-9
yellowblue
RCL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the RCL button until you see the display you want, then
hold the RCL button until the display flashes. If you
press the button when the ignition is off, the clock will
show for a few seconds.
PUSHBUTTONS: The five numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
15 stations (five AM, five FM1 and five FM2). Just:
Finding a Station
4. Press TONE to select the equalization that best suits
the type of station selected.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button and release it to listen to
stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,
stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press the button again to stop scanning. The sound will
mute while scanning, and SCAN will appear on the
display. If you press SCAN for more than two seconds,
the radio will change to P SCAN mode. P SCAN will
appear on the display.
3-10
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Press and hold one of the five numbered buttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return and the tone that you
selected will also be automatically selected for
that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P SCAN: Press SCAN for more than two seconds, and
P SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will go to
the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning.
yellowblue
Setting the Tone
Adjusting the Speakers
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass. When you use this
control, the radio’s tone setting will switch to manual.
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn the knob to increase or
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
tone setting will switch to manual. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
FADE: Press the knob lightly so it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it to move the sound to
the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for jazz, vocal,
pop, rock and classical stations. JAZZ will appear on the
display when you first press TONE. Each time you press
it, another setting will appear on the display. Press it
again after CLASSIC appears and MANUAL will
appear. Manual tone control will return to the BASS
and TREB knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and
TREB knobs, control will return to them and
MANUAL will appear.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape
can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear
nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in
squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
3-11
yellowblue
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
TREB, BASS, TONE, SEEK and SCAN controls just as
you do for the radio. Other controls may have different
functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show
TP with a box around it and an arrow to show which
side of the tape is playing.
REV (1): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last selected station while the tape reverses.
You may select stations during REV operation by
using TUNE.
Your tape bias is set automatically. When a metal or
chrome tape is inserted, HI-BIAS appears on the
display. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is
off, first press EJECT or RCL.
FWD (2): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected
station while the tape advances. You may select stations
during FWD operation by using TUNE.
If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an error.
PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
D E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
(4): Press this button to reduce background noise.
Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display.
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
D
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
D E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
TONE: Press this button to select a tone while playing a
cassette. The tone that you set will be activated each
time you play a cassette tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it
to your dealer when reporting the problem.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to search for the
next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for SEEK to work.
3-12
yellowblue
SCAN: Press this button to listen to each selection for a
few seconds. The tape will go to the next selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute,
SCAN will appear on the display and the tape direction
arrow will blink while scanning.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone
Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a
tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
TAPE AUX: If you have a tape inserted and the radio is
playing, press TAPE AUX to play your tape. To return
to the radio while a tape is playing, press AM-FM. The
inactive tape will remain safely inside the radio for
future listening.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
3-13
yellowblue
RCL: Press this button briefly to recall the station being
played or to display the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the RCL button until you see the display you want, then
hold the RCL button until the display flashes. If you
press the button when the ignition is off, the clock will
show for a few seconds.
PUSHBUTTONS: The five numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
15 stations (five AM, five FM1 and five FM2). Just:
Finding a Station
4. Press TONE to select the equalization that best suits
the type of station selected.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button and release it to listen to
stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,
stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press the button again to stop scanning. The sound will
mute while scanning, and SCAN will appear on the
display. If you press SCAN for more than two seconds,
the radio will change to P SCAN mode. P SCAN will
appear on the display.
3-14
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Press and hold one of the five numbered buttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return and the tone that
you selected will also be automatically selected for
that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P SCAN: Press SCAN for more than two seconds, and
P SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will go to
the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning.
yellowblue
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass. When you use this
control, the radio’s tone setting will switch to manual.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn the knob to increase or
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
tone setting will switch to manual. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for jazz, vocal,
pop, rock and classical stations. JAZZ will appear on the
display when you first press TONE. Each time you press
it, another setting will appear on the display. Press it
again after CLASSIC appears and MANUAL will
appear. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and MANUAL will appear.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob
to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The
middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press the knob lightly so it extends. Then pull
the knob all the way out. Turn it to move the sound to
the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape
can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear
nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in
squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
TREB, BASS, TONE, SEEK and SCAN controls just as
you do for the radio. Other controls may have different
functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show
TP with a box around it and an arrow to show which
side of the tape is playing.
3-15
yellowblue
Your tape bias is set automatically. When a metal or
chrome tape is inserted, HI-BIAS appears on the
display. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is
off, first press EJECT or RCL.
If E and a number appear on the radio display and the
tape won’t play because of an error, it could be that:
D E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn
the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
D E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
REV (1): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last selected station while the tape reverses.
You may select stations during REV operation by
using TUNE.
3-16
FWD (2): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected
station while the tape advances. You may select stations
during FWD operation by using TUNE.
PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
D
(4): Press this button to reduce background
noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
TONE: Press this button to select a tone while playing a
cassette. The tone that you set will be activated each
time you play a cassette tape.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to search for the
next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for SEEK to work.
yellowblue
SCAN: Press this button to listen to each selection for a
few seconds. The tape will go to the next selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute
while scanning, SCAN will appear on the display and
the tape direction arrow will blink while scanning.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a
tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
TAPE-CD: Press this button if you have a disc loaded
in the CD player and the radio is playing, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE-CD to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening. The display will show TP
and CD.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The
radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
Playing a Compact Disc
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc
should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when
the ignition is off, first press EJECT or RCL.
The CD player will play either normal-size discs or the
smaller 8 cm discs with an adapter.
Note that when the disc is inserted, CD will be
displayed. When the disc is playing, a box will appear
around CD on the display. If you select a tone setting for
your CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear in the display.
3-17
yellowblue
If E (error) and a number appear on the radio display
and the disc comes out, it could be that:
D E20: The road is too rough. The disc should play
when the road is smoother.
TONE: Press this button to select a tone while playing
a compact disc. The tone that you set will be activated
each time you play a compact disc.
D E20: The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
SEEK: Press the down arrow to go to the start of the
current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If you hold
the button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving rearward or forward through the disc.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to each selection for a
few seconds. The disc will go to the next selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute
while scanning, SCAN will appear on the display.
D E20: The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or
upside down.
and try again.
REV (1): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
The display will show elapsed time.
FWD (2): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
The display will show elapsed time.
RDM (5): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the
display when you press this button.
3-18
RCL: Press this button to see which track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has
been playing. To change what is normally shown on the
display (track or elapsed time), press the button until
you see the display you want, then hold the button until
the display flashes. While elapsed time is showing, EL
TM will appear on the display.
yellowblue
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player.
TAPE-CD: Press this button to change to the tape or
disc function when the radio is on and either a tape or
CD is inserted. Press AM-FM to return to the radio
while a CD or tape is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. If
you have the optional CD changer and the CD changer
is loaded, the TAPE-CD button will activate the changer
and a box will be lighted around CDC in the display.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the compact disc
or cassette tape. The icon with the box around it on the
display will eject and the radio will play. EJECT may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes
and compact discs may be loaded with the radio and
ignition off if this button is pressed first.
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
3-19
yellowblue
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
2. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
3. Turn the radio off.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
3-20
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
yellowblue
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.
Understanding Radio Reception
2. Turn the radio off.
AM
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
3-21
yellowblue
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
3-22
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
yellowblue
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears
on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
If the cleaning cassette ejects, insert the cassette at least
three times to ensure thorough cleaning.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape
is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
3-23
yellowblue
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-24
yellowblue
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-16
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-24
4-28
4-30
4-32
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-
4-1
yellowblue
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
yellowblue
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
D
D
D
D
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so
they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
yellowblue
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
yellowblue
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
4-5
yellowblue
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
yellowblue
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
yellowblue
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
yellowblue
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Steering Tips
Using Anti-Lock
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
4-9
yellowblue
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
yellowblue
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-11
yellowblue
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-12
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
yellowblue
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
4-13
yellowblue
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Driving at Night
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-14
yellowblue
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-15
yellowblue
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-16
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-17
yellowblue
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-18
yellowblue
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before you
start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-19
yellowblue
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-20
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
yellowblue
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Oldsmobile dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
recommended pressure?
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-21
yellowblue
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-22
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
yellowblue
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
D Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest
gear possible.
D Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
or an accident.
D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-23
yellowblue
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-24
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
yellowblue
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution. Accelerate gently.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
4-25
yellowblue
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-26
yellowblue
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-27
yellowblue
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Towing Your Vehicle from the Front
There are two ways to tow your vehicle from the front.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
You can tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use
at your destination. Be sure to use the proper towing
equipment designed for recreational towing. Follow the
instructions for the towing equipment.
To tow your vehicle with a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-28
yellowblue
To tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground,
follow these steps:
5. Turn the ignition to ACC.
6. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to replace the fuses once you reach your
destination. To replace a fuse:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition.
3. Replace the fuse.
NOTICE:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
Make sure that the towing speed does not exceed
65 mph (105 km/h), or your vehicle could be
badly damaged.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Remove the following fuses from the left side of the
instrument panel fuse block: A) Radio, B) Wiper,
H) Powertrain Control Module, K) Body Function
Control Module, Cluster. This will prevent your battery
from draining while towing. See “Instrument Panel Fuse
Block - Left” in Section 6 for the location of these fuses.
4-29
yellowblue
Towing Your Vehicle from the Rear
NOTICE:
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your
vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
4-30
Loading Your Vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s side rear passenger
door tells you the proper size, speed rating and
recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your
vehicle. It also gives you important information about
the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the
total weight that you can carry. This weight is called the
Vehicle Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options.
yellowblue
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don’t carry more than 132 lbs. (60 kg) in
your trunk.
CAUTION:
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
4-31
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in
a crash.
D Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
4-32
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
yellowblue
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-33
yellowblue
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-34
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Network
16 E. Judson Street
P.O. Box 436006
Pontiac, MI 48343-6006
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must
add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
yellowblue
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be sure
you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
4-35
yellowblue
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly. And because you have anti-lock brakes,
do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you
do, both systems won’t work well, or at all.
4-36
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
yellowblue
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
4-37
yellowblue
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need
additional wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows
on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal
a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about
to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
Driving On Grades
NOTICE:
Do not tow on steep continuous grades exceeding
6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than normal
engine and transaxle temperatures may result
and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transaxle
to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator
is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to reduce
engine load (see “Engine Overheating” in the Index).
4-38
yellowblue
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-39
yellowblue
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review this information before you start
your trip.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-40
yellowblue
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-9
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-18
5-19
5-29
5-30
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
yellowblue
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the button once to
turn your hazard flashers
on. The switch will flash
when activated.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button again.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
yellowblue
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please follow the steps here to do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The ACDelco FreedomR battery in your vehicle
has a built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or
jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks
clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when
there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-3
yellowblue
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
Do not leave your radio on while trying to jump
start your vehicle. The radio could be badly
damaged and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Be sure to turn off your radio
before following this procedure.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N) before setting the parking brake.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off all
lamps that aren’t needed, as well as radios. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In
addition, it could save your radio.
5-4
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelco FreedomR
battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if
a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too. Before you
connect the cables, here are some things you should
know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (-) will go to a heavy unpainted metal
engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts, too.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5-5
yellowblue
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-6
yellowblue
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other
end of the negative
cable doesn’t go to the
dead battery.
It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of
the vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
11. If the THEFT SYSTEM light flashes, wait until the
light stops flashing. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-7
yellowblue
13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
A. Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-8
To help avoid serious personal injury to you
or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks.
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid
damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas
of the vehicle.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. You will also find a
low coolant level warning light on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See “Low Coolant Warning Light” in
the Index.
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is
essential that the correct towing equipment is used to
tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel-lift
equipment or car-carrier equipment.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
5-9
yellowblue
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-10
yellowblue
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D
D
D
D
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)
or THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive.
Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the
warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-11
yellowblue
CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
5-12
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark or slightly higher, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
5-13
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-14
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So
use the recommended coolant.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-15
yellowblue
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about two or two and
one-half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be
vented out the discharge hose.
5-16
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
yellowblue
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark or
slightly higher
5-17
yellowblue
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight.
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling
system has cooled down. If the coolant isn’t at the
proper level, repeat Steps 1 to 3 and reinstall the
pressure cap or see your dealer.
5-18
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
yellowblue
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-19
yellowblue
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need
is in the trunk. Turn the
center retainer nut on the
compact spare cover
counterclockwise to
remove it.
Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and
remove it. Then lift off the
adapter and remove the
spare tire.
Remove the jack and jack handle from the trunk. Your
vehicle’s jack and jack handle are stored in a foam tray.
Lift and remove the cover. (See “Compact Spare Tire”
later in this section for more information about the
compact spare.) You will find the jacking instructions
label on the underside of the tire cover.
5-20
yellowblue
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. On vehicles equipped with steel wheel covers, do not
try to remove the nut caps from the wheel cover.
Give the cover a sharp pull or gently pry on the edge
of the cover to remove it from the wheel.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and jack
handle (B).
5-21
yellowblue
2. Some models are equipped with aluminum wheels.
Remove the cover plate to find the wheel nuts.
Carefully use the wedge end of the wheel wrench to
pry it off.
5-22
3. Then use the jack handle to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
4. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5-23
yellowblue
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.
6. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
7. Then take off the flat tire.
5-24
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become
loose after a time. The wheel could come off and
cause an accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you
can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
9. Install the tire and replace the wheel nuts with the
cone end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand or with the jack handle until the wheel is
held against the hub.
5-25
yellowblue
CAUTION:
11. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
5-26
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If
you try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
A. Nut
B. Wing Nut
C. Extension (If Equipped)
D. Adapter
Store the jack and jack handle in the foam tray. Place
the foam tray in the spare tire compartment. Store the
flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment. Place the
tire in the compartment, then secure the adapter and
wing bolt.
E. Wrench
F. Jack
G. Tool Tray
H. Flat Road Tire
5-27
yellowblue
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index. See the
storage instructions label to replace your compact spare
into your trunk properly.
A. Nut
B. Cover
C. Wing Nut
D. Adapter
E. Jack Handle
F. Jack
G. Spare Tire
5-28
yellowblue
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
5-29
yellowblue
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-30
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may
free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
yellowblue
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-8
6-12
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-22
6-23
6-24
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Engine Coolant
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
6-27
6-28
6-36
6-37
6-45
6-45
6-48
6-49
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-62
6-63
6-63
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
6-
6-1
yellowblue
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
yellowblue
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications
which have been developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for
better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasolines. For more
information, write to: American Automobile
Manufacturer’s Association, 7430 Second Ave, Suite 300,
Detroit MI 48202.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
6-3
yellowblue
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to
your authorized Oldsmobile dealer for diagnosis to
determine the cause of failure. In the event it is
determined that the cause of the condition is the type of
fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not
the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Oldsmobile dealer for service.
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
6-4
NOTICE:
yellowblue
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
6-5
yellowblue
The cap is behind a hinged door on the right side of your
vehicle. To open the door, insert your finger into the
finger depression next to the fuel door.
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
While refueling, hang the tethered cap inside the
fuel door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
6-6
yellowblue
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-7
yellowblue
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-8
Hood Release
The following sections tell you how to check fluids,
lubricants and important parts under the hood.
1. To open the hood, first
pull the hood release
handle inside
the vehicle.
yellowblue
3. Lift the hood, release the
hood prop rod from its
retainer and put the hood
prop rod into the slot
marked PROP ROD.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift the
secondary hood release handle before lifting
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then let the hood drop from about 8 to
12 inches (20 to 30 cm).
6-9
yellowblue
3100 V6 (CODE J) Engine
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Engine Coolant Surge Tank
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Engine Oil Dipstick
6-10
E.
F.
G.
H.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Air Cleaner/Filter
Battery
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
yellowblue
3100 V6 (CODE M) Engine
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Engine Coolant Surge Tank
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Engine Oil Dipstick
E.
F.
G.
H.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Air Cleaner/Filter
Battery
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-11
yellowblue
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL light on the instrument panel comes
on, it means you need to check your engine oil level
right away. For more information, see “Check Oil
Light” in the Index. You should check your engine oil
level regularly; this is an added reminder.
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
6-12
The engine oil dipstick is
yellow and located on the
front of the engine.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
yellowblue
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
The engine oil fill cap is located on the front of the engine.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-13
yellowblue
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-14
yellowblue
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s going
to be 0_F (-18_C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
6-15
yellowblue
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-16
The air cleaner is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment.
To check or replace the air filter:
1. Unscrew the four Phillips screws, then pull the
cover back.
2. Remove the air cleaner filter.
3. Be sure to install the air cleaner filter and replace the
cover tightly.
yellowblue
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
NOTICE:
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a
leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible. You
may also have your fluid level checked by your dealer
or service center when you have your oil changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause
a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
6-17
yellowblue
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRONR-III is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your pressure cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating.
When you replace your surge tank pressure cap, a GM
cap is recommended.
6-18
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
yellowblue
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:
D
D
D
D
D
Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant.
6-19
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-20
The surge tank is located on the passenger’s side of the
engine compartment.
yellowblue
Adding Coolant
CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark or slightly higher.
If the low coolant light
comes on and stays on, it
means you’re low on
engine coolant.
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it
is hand-tight.
6-21
yellowblue
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
6-22
yellowblue
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap labeled
WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
D
D
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
6-23
yellowblue
Brakes
Brake Fluid
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
6-24
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
yellowblue
When your brake fluid falls
to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on.
See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
D
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
6-25
yellowblue
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-26
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When
you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
yellowblue
Brake Pedal Travel
Replacing Brake System Parts
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts
have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle
is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you
replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when
your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones
put in -- be sure you get new approved GM replacement
parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if
someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly. If
you drive in that way, then -- very carefully -- make a few
moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),
so your brakes will adjust properly.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
pumping the brake pedal repeatedly while the engine is
running with the shift lever in PARK (P).
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco FreedomR
battery. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend
an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s label.
6-27
yellowblue
Vehicle Storage
Bulb Replacement
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
This section describes bulb changing procedures for
some of your interior and exterior lamps. For bulb sizes,
see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. For any bulbs not
listed in this section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-28
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
yellowblue
Headlamps
1. With the hood open and the engine off, pull the
fastener out of the plastic splash shield covering the
top of the headlamp assembly and remove it.
3. Remove the lamp assembly from the vehicle by
pulling forward. Use care not to scratch the vehicle
with the lamp or the lamp with the fender.
2. Carefully pull directly up on the two latches.
4. Unclip the wiring harness and twist the bulb less
than one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise and
remove. Gently wiggle the bulb out of the socket.
6-29
yellowblue
Front Exterior Bulbs
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the bulb or
lamp assembly.
6. Replace the lamp to its original position by carefully
lining up the lamp to the mounting balls.
7. Press down on the two latches. Replace the splash
shield by pushing down on the retainer.
6-30
A. Front Turn Signal
B. High-Beam Headlamp
C. Low-Beam Headlamp
yellowblue
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement
1. With the hood open and the engine off, pull the
fastener out of the plastic splash shield covering the
top of the headlamp assembly and remove it.
3. Remove the lamp assembly from the vehicle by
pulling forward. Use care not to scratch the vehicle
with the lamp or the lamp with the fender.
2. Carefully pull directly up on the two latches.
4. Unclip the wiring harness and twist the bulb less
than one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise and
remove. Gently wiggle the bulb out of the socket.
6-31
yellowblue
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
1. Open the trunk and locate the CHMSL housing at the
top of the trunk.
2. Twist the bulb housing one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise to remove it.
3. Gently remove the bulb(s) and replace with a
new one.
5. Press the tab on the white bulb socket and twist it
less than one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise.
6. Reconnect the wiring harness to the bulb or
lamp assembly.
7. Replace the lamp to its original position by carefully
lining up the lamp to the mounting balls.
8. Press down on the two latches. Replace the splash
shield by pushing down on the retainer.
6-32
yellowblue
Rear Exterior Lamps
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal/Back-Up Lamps
1. Unscrew the
fastener that holds
in the trunk trim.
2. Gently pull back the trunk trim.
A. Back-Up Lamp
B. Taillamp/Stoplamp
C. Rear Turn Signal Lamp
6-33
yellowblue
3. Remove the three plastic wingnuts.
6-34
4. Pull out the taillamp assembly to expose
the backplate.
yellowblue
Make sure that all six tabs are securely fastened to
the backplate before reassembling the lamp.
8. When securing the lamp back into place, align the
lamp so that the trunk lid doesn’t contact it.
Dome Lamp
To change your dome lamp bulb, grasp the center front
and center rear portion of the housing and squeeze
firmly but gently. The housing should pop off.
If this doesn’t work, you may need to use a small
flat-head screwdriver under the side of the housing to
help pry it off.
5. Carefully remove the backplate by pulling the four
outer tabs and two inner tabs sideways away from
the backplate.
6. Gently wiggle the bulbs to remove them from the
socket. Replace the bulb.
7. Reverse the steps to reassemble the rear lamp
assembly and mount to the car.
6-35
yellowblue
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner
Checks and Services” for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
length, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
Here’s how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from
the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
6-36
yellowblue
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Oldsmobile Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
6-37
yellowblue
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is located on
the driver’s side rear passenger door, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-38
yellowblue
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
6-39
yellowblue
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
6-40
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
yellowblue
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-41
yellowblue
Treadwear
Temperature -- A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-42
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
yellowblue
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
6-43
yellowblue
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
6-44
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
Use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install
them on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
yellowblue
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Turpentine
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Lacquer Thinner
Here are some cleaning tips:
Nail Polish Remover
D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
D Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-45
yellowblue
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-46
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
yellowblue
Cleaning Vinyl
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Cleaning Leather
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
6-47
yellowblue
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
6-48
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
yellowblue
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that
contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be
flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface,
or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
6-49
yellowblue
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
6-50
yellowblue
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on any wheels other than chrome-plated wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
6-51
yellowblue
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
6-52
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Oldsmobile will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
yellowblue
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
1052918**
8 oz. (0.237 L)
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
1052929
1052930
12345721
12345725
12377964*
12377966*
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
8 oz. (0.237 L)
2.5 sq. ft.
12 oz. (0.354 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
t Protectant
Armor All
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner
Wheel Cleaner
Capture Dry Spot Remover
Synthetic Chamois
Silicone Tire Shine
Finish Enhancer
Cleaner Wax
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
t
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
6-53
yellowblue
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the bottom of your spare tire
cover. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
D
D
D
D
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
6-54
yellowblue
Electrical System
Headlamp Wiring
Add-On Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have your
headlamp wiring checked right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
6-55
yellowblue
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick a feature of your vehicle that you
can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: two
instrument panel fuse blocks and the engine
compartment fuse block.
6-56
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
blocks are located at each
end of the instrument panel.
To access the fuses, open
the fuse panel door by
pulling out.
To replace the door, insert the hooks at the front end
first, then push the door into the instrument panel to
secure it.
yellowblue
Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Left
Fuse
Usage
G
Body Function Control Module
H
Powertrain Control Module
J
Door Locks
K
Body Function Control Module,
Cluster
STOP LPS
Stoplamps
HAZARD LPS
Hazard Lamps
IPC/HVAC
BATT
Cluster, Climate Control
MICRO RELAY
TRUNK REL
Remote Trunk Release
CIRCUIT BRKR Power Seats
PWR SEATS
Fuse
Usage
A
Radio
B
Wipers
MICRO RELAY
DR UNLOCK
Door Locks
C
Trunk Release and Remote Lock
Control
MICRO RELAY
DR LOCK
Door Locks
D
Turn Signals
Power Mirrors
F
Air Bag
MICRO RELAY
DRIVERS DR
UNLOCK
Not Used
E
6-57
yellowblue
Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Right
P90–16–6907–X
Fuse
Usage
A
Instrument Panel Lights, Dimmer
B
Cruise Control
C
Climate Control System
D
Cruise Control
E
Fog Lamps
F
Interior Lamps, Body Function
Control Module
G
Radio
H
Sunroof
CIRCUIT BRKR Power Windows
PWR WNDWS
MICRO RELAY
FOG LPS
6-58
Fog Lamps
yellowblue
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuse
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the
air cleaner.
Usage
Maxi-Fuses
1
Ignition Switch
2
Left-Hand Electrical
Center-Power Seats, Power
Mirrors, Door Locks, Trunk
Release and Remote Lock Control
6-59
yellowblue
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
3
Left-Hand Electrical Center-Stop
Lamps, Hazard Lamps, Body
Function Control Module, Cluster,
Climate Control System
Micro-Relays
Right-Hand Electrical Center-Fog
Lamps, Radio, Body Function
Control Module, Interior Lamps
4
5
Ignition Switch
6
Not Used
7
Anti-Lock Brakes
8
Cooling Fans
Mini-Relays
Usage
16
Air Conditioning Compressor
17
Not Used
18
Fuel Pump
19
Automatic Light Control
20
Automatic Light Control
21
Horn
22
Daytime Running Lamps
Mini-Fuses
23 - 32
Spare Fuse Holder
33
Rear Defog
34
Accessory Power Outlets, Cigar
Lighter
9
Rear Defog
10
Not Used
11
Anti-Lock Brakes
35
Anti-Lock Brakes
12
Cooling Fan
36
Anti-Lock Brakes
13
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
37
14
Cooling Fans
Air Conditioning Compressor,
Body Function Control Module
15
Cooling Fans
6-60
yellowblue
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
38
Automatic Transaxle
47
39
Powertrain Control Module,
Ignition
Canister Purge Valve, Powertrain
Control Module, Exhaust Gas
Recirculation, Heated O2 Sensor
40
Anti-Lock Brakes
48
Fuel Pump, Injectors
41
Ignition System
49
Generator
42
Back-Up Lamps, Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock
50
Right-Hand Headlamp
51
Left-Hand Headlamp
43
Horn
52
Cooling Fan
44
Powertrain Control Module
53
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
45
Parking Lamps
54
Fuse Puller for Mini-Fuses
46
Rear Defog, Daytime Running
Lamps, Climate Control System
55
Tach Test Point for Diagnostic
Testing
6-61
yellowblue
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb
High-Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Low-Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Front Park/Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 NA
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3357
High Level Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Interior Lamps
Bulb
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
6-62
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Liters
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3-4-5-6
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 195_F (91_C)
Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Liters
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3-4-5-6
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 195_F (91_C)
yellowblue
Refrigerant, Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See refrigerant charge label under the hood.
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
Tire Pressures, Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Tire-Loading Information label on the driver’s
side rear passenger door.
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 quarts (12.9 L)
Engine Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0 gallons (56.8 L)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be
sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in
this manual.
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air
conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be
sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask
your dealer.
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . AC Type A-1279C
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF-47
Spark Plugs . . . . . AC TypeS41-940 (Platinum Plug)
Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0 inches (48.0 cm)
Vehicle Dimensions
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 inches (487.8 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69.4 inches (176.3 cm)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.4 inches (143.2 cm)
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 inches (271.9 cm)
Front Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 inches (149.9 cm)
Rear Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59.3 inches (150.5 cm)
6-63
yellowblue
✍
6-64
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-7
7-19
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-26
7-30
7-32
7-33
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
yellowblue
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer
for details.
7-2
yellowblue
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
7-3
yellowblue
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
yellowblue
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Definition
Short Trip/City Intervals
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if
any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication
(or 6 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
D If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
or other commercial application.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
7-5
yellowblue
Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance is true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
7-6
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-7
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-8
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-9
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-10
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
7-11
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-12
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-13
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-14
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-15
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-16
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-17
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-18
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-19
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-20
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-21
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-22
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-23
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-24
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-25
yellowblue
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in
Part D.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
7-26
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See “Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
yellowblue
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Automatic Transaxle Inspection
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to
your Oldsmobile dealership Service Department and
have it repaired as soon as possible.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Wiper Blade Check
Body Lubrication Service
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Lubricate all body door hinges and latches, including
those for the hood, trunk lid, glove box door and console
door. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.)
7-27
yellowblue
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
7-28
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
yellowblue
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position. The
key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in
PARK (P).
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in OFF.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-29
yellowblue
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
7-30
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once
a year.
yellowblue
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. The
parking brake is self-adjusting and no manual
adjustment is required. You may need to have your
brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
7-31
yellowblue
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake
System
7-32
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or
HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
USAGE
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Power Steering
System
FLUID/LUBRICANT
GM OptikleenR Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
yellowblue
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-33
yellowblue
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-34
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
yellowblue
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Oldsmobile if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance Program
Features and Benefits
Courtesy Transportation
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-10
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
8-
8-1
yellowblue
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Oldsmobile. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
yellowblue
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Network by calling
1-800-442-6537. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
When contacting Oldsmobile, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you must file
with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any
additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer
to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
8-3
yellowblue
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to
settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the
interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of
the program is free of charge and your case will generally
be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed
with any other venue for relief available to you.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
Customer Assistance Offices
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-4
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Oldsmobile has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Network. Any TTY user
can communicate with Oldsmobile by dialing:
1-800-833-OLDS (6537). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Oldsmobile encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
Oldsmobile, the letter should be addressed to Oldsmobile’s
Customer Assistance Network.
United States
Customer Assistance Representative
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Network
16 E. Judson Street
P.O. Box 436006
Pontiac, MI 48343-6006
1-800-442-6537
1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-442-OLDS (6537)
yellowblue
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
GMODC - Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax:
905-644-4866
Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean,
call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver or
passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. When
calling from outside Canada, please dial 1-905-644-3063.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-5
yellowblue
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance
Program Features and Benefits
Oldsmobile’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is
staffed by courteous and capable Roadside Assistance
Representatives who are available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the Bumper
to Bumper warranty period, at no expense to you:
D Fuel delivery
D Lock-out service (identification required)
D Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service or
in the event of a vehicle-disabling accident
D Flat tire change
D Jump starts
D Minor repairs to disabled vehicles
D Assistance when vehicle is mired in sand, mud
Security While You Travel
1-800-442-OLDS (6537)
As the proud owner of a new Oldsmobile vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road.
8-6
D
D
D
D
or snow
Trip routing
Trip interruption expense benefits
Dealership locator service
Courtesy Transportation - See Courtesy
Transportation section for details
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance specifically excludes
coverage for mounting, dismounting or changing of
snow tires, chains or other traction devices.
yellowblue
In some cases, where service is impractical, the driver
may be authorized to obtain other service for which
reimbursement is provided.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Oldsmobile’s comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
D Location of vehicle
D Telephone number of your location
D Vehicle model, year and color
D Mileage of vehicle
D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
D Vehicle license plate number
Oldsmobile reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Oldsmobile’s judgement, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use
our service, it is added security while traveling for
you and your family. Remember, we’re only a
phone call away. Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance -- 1-800-442-OLDS (6537).
Courtesy Transportation
Oldsmobile has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating
dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a
customer support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If it is
determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into
the service department immediately and is still
operative, you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until
scheduling can be accomplished.
8-7
yellowblue
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Oldsmobile
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation such
as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day
maximum) may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
8-8
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and
may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and
Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty
coverage information.
yellowblue
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealerships and all program options, such
as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at
its sole discretion.
General Motors and participating dealerships reserve
the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not
possessing a valid motor vehicle operators license in
their name, anyone who is under the influence of alcohol
or drugs, or anyone whose mental or physical abilities
are impaired so as to be unable to operate a motor
vehicle safely.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
8-9
yellowblue
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-442-6537, or write:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Network
16 E. Judson Street
P.O. Box 436006
Pontiac, MI 48343-6006
8-10
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
yellowblue
1999 OLDSMOBILE SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 OLDSMOBILE
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1999 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
8-11
yellowblue
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
1
9
9
9
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
1999
$90.00
1999
$50.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
1999
$20.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
1999
$15.00
TOTAL
PRICE
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(STATE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(ZIP CODE)
(
)
AREA CODE
GM-OLD-ORD99
8-12
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
MasterCard
VISA
$6.00
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
yellowblue
Section 9 Index
A
ccessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
Adjuster, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 1-52
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22, 2-53
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Air Bag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22, 2-53
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Alignment and Balance, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Antenna, Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 4-7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55, 4-7
Anti-Theft, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Appearance Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Audio Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 3-22, 6-55
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Auto-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Automatic Light Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Backing Up with a Trailer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Replacement, Remote Lock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
9-
9-1
yellowblue
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Brake
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Pedal Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 6-25
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Transaxle Shift Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 7-28
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Brakes, Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55, 4-7
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
BTSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 7-28
BTSI Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
CHMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Taillamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
9-2
C
apacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Care of Your Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Cassette Deck Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-13
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Center Console Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . 6-32
Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Chains, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Check Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Check Oil Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60, 6-12
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Top Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Circuit Breakers and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Cleaner, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
yellowblue
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Inside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Special Fabric Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Cleaning, Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Clock, Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Compact Disc Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Heater, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Surge Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Surge Tank Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
What to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Cupholder, Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cupholder, Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Cupholder, Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Damage, Finish
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Damage, Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Dead Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Defects, Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defogger, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Dimensions, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Dolby B Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-16
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Drive, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
9-3
yellowblue
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
In a Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
On Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
On Snow and Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Drunken Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Electrical Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 3-22, 6-55
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10, 6-11
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-28, 4-27
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59, 6-60, 6-61
9-4
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Starting Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil, What Kind to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
F
abric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Filter, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
First Gear, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
yellowblue
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Following Distance with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Foreign Countries, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garment Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Positions, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H
2-56
2-62
2-46
4-31
2-19
2-44
4-31
4-31
4-31
alogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Hitches, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Ignition Positions
..............................
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Drive Axle Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator and Heater Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
7-29
2-40
6-38
2-42
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
9-5
yellowblue
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56, 6-57, 6-58
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
J
ack, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
K
ey Lock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Tire-Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Mirror Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-25
9-6
Lights
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22, 2-53
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 4-7
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 6-25
Charging System Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Check Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60, 6-12
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Engine Oil Pressure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Low Coolant Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 6-21
Low Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
PasslockR Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Safety Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 2-53
Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Lock Out Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Key Lock Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Rear Door Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Low Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 6-21
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Lubrication Service, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
yellowblue
M
aintenance, Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Long Trip/Highway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Selecting the Right Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Short Trip/City Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Maintenance, Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Making Turns with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manual Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Mirror Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Inside Day/Night Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Manual Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Mobility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Neutral, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Night Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Odometer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Oil Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Owner Publications, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11, 8-12
Paint Spotting, Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
2-26
2-19
2-12
2-23
7-29
9-7
yellowblue
Parking (Continued)
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Passing with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
PasslockR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
PasslockR Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Power
Accessory Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Option Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11, 8-12
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Rain, Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
9-8
Rear
Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior Lock-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Inside Day/Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Refrigerants, Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Remote
Lock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Trunk Release Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Remote Lock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
yellowblue
Restraints
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Resynchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Reverse, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Rocking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
S
afety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Safety Belt Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 2-53
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Incorrect Usage 1-15, 1-16, 1-17, 1-18, 1-49, 1-50, 1-51
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 1-27
Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 2-53
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Why They Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Seat Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 1-52
Seatback, Reclining Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Seats
Folding Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Manual Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Second Gear, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Second-Gear Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
9-9
yellowblue
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Bulletins, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11, 8-12
Manuals, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Publications, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11, 8-12
Work, Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11., 8-12
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11, 8-12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Out of Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Signaling Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Sound Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 3-22, 6-55
Spare Tire, Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Specifications, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Stains, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
9-10
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Stoplamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Stuck In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Supplemental Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
How to Add Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Surge Tank Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
T
achometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Theft-Deterrent Feature, CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
THEFTLOCKR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Third Gear, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Time, Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
yellowblue
Tire Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Buying New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Changing a Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Inflation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Uniform Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Used Replacement Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Top Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Torque Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26, 6-59
Towing
From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
From the Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Towing Your Vehicle From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Trailer
Backing Up with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Driving with a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Following Distance with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Making Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Passing with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Ignition Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Transmitters, Remote Lock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Transportation, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
9-11
yellowblue
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Release Lockout, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Release, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
TTY Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Turn Signal On Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
U
nderbody Flushing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Visor Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Visors, Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
W
arning Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
9-12
Washer Fluid, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26, 6-59
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Used Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Lock Out Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 6-23
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32, 6-55
Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Wiper Blade Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Wiring, Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Wrench, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement